manualshive.com logo in svg

LG P936, User Manual

The LG P936 User Manual is now available for download at manualshive.com, completely free of charge. This comprehensive manual provides detailed instructions and information about the LG P936, ensuring users can maximize the features and functions of this top-quality smartphone by accessing the manual now.

Share
Download
background image

108

Google

 

ﺕﺎﻘﻴﺒﻄﺗ

 .

ﻰﻟﻭﻷﺍ

 

ﺔﺠﻴﺘﻨﻟﺍ

 

ﻰﻠﻋ

 

ﺔﻴﻤﺴﺗ

 

ﻊﺿﻭ

 

ﻢﺘﻳ

 

؛ﻙﺭﺎﺴﻣ

 

ﻦﻣ

 

ﺪﻳﺰﻣ

 

ﺔﻓﺮﻌﻤﻟ

 

ﺎﻣ

 

ﺔﻴﻤﺴﺗ

 

ﻰﻠﻋ

 

ﻂﻐﻀﻟﺍ

 

ﻚﻨﻜﻤﻳ

.

ﺔﻣﻼﻌﻟﺍ

 

ﻝﻮﺣ

 

ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ

 

ﺓﺩﻮﻌﻠﻟ

 

 

ﻞﻘﻨﺘﻟﺍ

ﻞﻘﻨﺘﻟﺍ

 

ﺰﻣﺭ

 

ﻰﻠﻋ

 

ﻂﻐﺿﺍ

 

،ﺀﺎﻬﺘﻧﻻﺍ

 

ﺪﻨﻋ

  

.

ﻞﻘﻨﺘﻟﺍ

 

ﺽﺮﻋ

 

ﻰﻟﺇ

 

ﻲﻨﻛﺎﻣﺃ

 

ﻚﻨﻛﺎﻣﻷ

 

ﺔﻴﻌﺟﺮﻤﻟﺍ

 

ﺕﺍﺭﺎﺷﻹﺍ

 

ﻆﻔﺤﺑ

 

ﻡﻮﻘﺗ

 

ﻲﻨﻛﺎﻣﺃ

ﻲﻨﻛﺎﻣﺃ

 

،ﺔﻴﻠﺤﻤﻟﺍ

 

ﺕﺎﻛﺮﺸﻟﺍ

 

ﻭﺃ

 

ﻦﻳﻭﺎﻨﻌﻟﺍ

 

ﻞﺜﻣ

 

،ﺔﻠﻀﻔﻤﻟﺍ

.

ﺪﻌﺑ

 

ﺎﻤﻴﻓ

 

ﺎ ﹰﻌﻳﺮﺳ

 

ﺎﻬﻴﻠﻋ

 

ﺭﻮﺜﻌﻟﺍ

 

ﻦﻣ

 

ﻦﻜﻤﺘﺘﻟ

ﻲﻨﻛﺎﻣﺃ

 

ﺽﺮﻌﻟ

ﻲﻨﻛﺎﻣﺃ

 

ﺽﺮﻌﻟ

 

ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟﺍ

 

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

 

ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟﺍ

 

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

 

ﻰﻠﻋ

 

ﻂﻐﺿﺍ

 

،ﺔﻄﻳﺮﺧ

 

ﺽﺮﻋ

 

ﺪﻨﻋ

.

ﻲﻨﻛﺎﻣﺃ

ﻲﻨﻛﺎﻣﺃ

 

ﻰﻠﻋ

 

ﻂﻐﺿﺍﻭ

ﺔﻄﻳﺮﺨﻟﺍ

 

ﺢﺴﻣ

 

،ﺚﺤﺒﻟﺍ

 

ﺞﺋﺎﺘﻧﻭ

 

ﺕﺍﺭﺎﺴﻤﻟﺍ

 

ﻞﺜﻣ

 

،ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻣ

 

ﻱﺃ

 

ﺢﺴﻤﻟ

.

ﺔﻄﻳﺮﺨﻟﺍ

 

ﻦﻣ

ﺔﻄﻳﺮﺧ

 

ﺢﺴﻤﻟ

ﺔﻄﻳﺮﺧ

 

ﺢﺴﻤﻟ

 

ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟﺍ

 

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

 

ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟﺍ

 

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

 

ﻰﻠﻋ

 

ﻂﻐﺿﺍ

 

،ﺔﻄﻳﺮﺧ

 

ﺽﺮﻋ

 

ﺪﻨﻋ

.

ﺔﻄﻳﺮﺨﻟﺍ

 

ﺢﺴﻣ

ﺔﻄﻳﺮﺨﻟﺍ

 

ﺢﺴﻣ

 

ﻰﻠﻋ

 

ﻂﻐﺿﺍﻭ

ﺽﺮﻌﻟﺍ

 

ﻂﺧ

Google Latitude

Google Latitude

TM

TM

 

ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺎﺑ

 

ﻚﺋﺎﻗﺪﺻﺃ

 

ﻦﻋ

 

ﺚﺤﺑﺍ

 

ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺎﺑ

 

ﻚﺋﺎﻗﺪﺻﺃ

 

ﻦﻋ

 

ﺚﺤﺑﺍ

 

ﻊﻗﺍﻮﻣ

 

ﺽﺮﻋ

 

ﻚﺋﺎﻗﺪﺻﻷﻭ

 Google Latitude

 

ﻚﻟ

 

ﺢﻴﺘﻳ

 

ﺕﺎﻫﺎﺠﺗﺍ

 

ﺔﻓﺮﻌﻣﻭ

 

ﻂﺋﺍﺮﺨﻟﺍ

 

ﻰﻠﻋ

 

ﺾﻌﺒﻟﺍ

 

ﻢﻜﻀﻌﺑ

 

ﻢﺘﺗ

 

ﻻ

 .Google Latitude

 

ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺎﺑ

 

ﻚﺋﺎﻗﺪﺻﺃ

 

ﻊﻗﺍﻮﻣ

 

ﻚﻌﻗﻮﻣ

 

ﺔﻛﺭﺎﺸﻣ

 

ﻢﺘﺗ

 .

ﻲﺋﺎﻘﻠﺗ

 

ﻞﻜﺸﺑ

 

ﻚﻌﻗﻮﻣ

 

ﺔﻛﺭﺎﺸﻣ

Summary of Contents for P936

Page 1: ...User Guide LG P936 P N MFL67527207 1 0 H ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ LG P936 P N MFL67527207 1 0 H www lg com www lg com ENGLISH ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ENGLISH ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﹰ ﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻔﻮﻓﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ LG ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ Copyright 2012 LG Electronics Inc ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ LG Group ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ LG ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﻭ Talk ﻭ YouTube ﻭ Gmail ﻭ Maps ﻭ Google ﺇﻥ Google Inc ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺠﺎ...

Page 4: ...34 micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ 34 microSD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ 35 ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ 36 MHL 38 ﺑﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 38 ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ 40 ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ 40 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ 41 ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ 41 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 42 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ 44 ﹰ ﺍ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﰎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ 44 ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ 45 ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ 48 ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ 52 ﺍﻟﻨ...

Page 5: ...ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ 62 Wi Fi Direct 63 Wi Fi ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ 64 Smartshare 68 ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ 68 ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ 68 ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ 68 ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ 69 ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ 69 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ 70 ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ 71 ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 72 ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ 72 ﺇﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ 72 ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 72 ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ 74 ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 74 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 76 ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ...

Page 6: ...ﻑ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ 87 ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 87 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ 88 ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 91 ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ 92 ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ 93 ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ 93 ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺩ ﹼ ﺪ ﻣﺤ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ 95 ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ 95 ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ 96 ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 97 ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ 97 ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ 98 ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 98 ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺽ 99 ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ 100 ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 100 ﺷﺮﺍ...

Page 7: ...ﺎﻣﻞ 104 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ 104 ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ 10 105 Google Google ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 105 Google ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ 105 Google Maps 106 ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ 107 ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ 108 ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ 108 ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ 108 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ 110 ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ 111 Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ 112 Gmail 113 Google Talk 11 116 ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ 116 ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ 116 ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 117 ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 118 Polaris O...

Page 8: ...creen Phone On Screen Phone 128 LG ﻣﻦ On Screen Phone 2 0 ﻫﺎﺗﻒ 13 132 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 132 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ 133 ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 134 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 135 ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 135 ﺇﳝﺎﺀﺓ 136 ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ 139 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 140 ﻭﺍﳌﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ 140 ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ 140 SD ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ 140 ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ 140 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 141 ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ 141 ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 141 ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ 141 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻮﻝ ...

Page 9: ...ﺳﻠﻜﻴ LG ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ 142 OTA 14 144 ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ 144 ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ DivX ﺧﺪﻣﺔ 145 Dolby Mobile 14 146 ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ 14 147 ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ 14 148 ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ...

Page 10: ... ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ SAR ﺃﻭ ﺩ ﹼ ﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ SAR ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ SAR ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ LG ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺽ ﹼ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨ...

Page 11: ... ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻢ 1 5 ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﹼﺐ ﻠ ﻳﺘﻄ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﹰ ﺎ ﹼ ﻧﻮﻋﻴ ﹰ ﻻ ﺍﺗﺼﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﻲ ﹰ ﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺣ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺼﺒﺢ ﹸ ﻳ ﹼ ﻥ ﺃ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﹼﻘﺔ ﻠ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﹼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﹼ ﻥ ﺃ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭ...

Page 12: ...ﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺽ ﹼ ﺗﻌﺮ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺇﺫ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﻃﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﻻ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍ...

Page 13: ...ﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺽ ﹼ ﺗﻌﺮ ﻻ ﻻ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﹰ ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﹰ ﻻ ﻣﺘﺤﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻻ ﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﺤﻄﻤ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻮﺀ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗ...

Page 14: ...ﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﹰ ﻻ ﻣﺤﻤﻮ ﹰ ﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﹰ ﺎ ﺩﻭﻣ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻒ ﹼ ﺗﻮﻗ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ RF ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ...

Page 15: ...ﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻻ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻟﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﱡﻦ ﻜ ﺗﻤ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﺼﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭﻙ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ...

Page 16: ...ﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺐ ﹼ ﺒ ﺗﺘﺴ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺒﻞ ﹺ ﻗ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻦ ﹰ ﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﺪ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻋ...

Page 17: ...ﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ LG ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻤﺔ ﹼ ﻣﺼﻤ ﳊﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻻ ﲤﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻼﺕ ﹼ ﺍﳌﻮﺻ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺽ ﹼ ﺗ...

Page 18: ...ﻻ ﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ LG ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﺮﻉ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ Electronics ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﹰ ﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﻗﻢ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ...

Page 19: ...ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ 2 ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ 3 ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ 2 ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﹰ ﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ ﻳﻤﻜ...

Page 20: ...ﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ 2 ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ 2 ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻣﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ...

Page 21: ... ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺒﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ...

Page 22: ...ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﹸﺮ ﻛ ﺗﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ PIN ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ 5 ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻟﻚ ﺴﻤﺢ ﹸ ﻳ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 30 ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ PIN PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ...

Page 23: ... ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﹴ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ 8 ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ 4 ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺮﺟﻰ ﹸ ﻳ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ...

Page 24: ...ﻗﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ SD SD ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ USB ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ 7 ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ 1 USB ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ USB ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺃﻧﻪ USB ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﹰ ﺍ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺳﺘﺘﻠﻘﻰ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺛﻢ 2 ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ mi...

Page 25: ...e IV LG PC Suite IV ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ SMS ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ LG PC Suite LG PC Suite ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤ...

Page 26: ...ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ 3 LGInstaller exe ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ 4 LG PC Suite IV ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ LG PC Suite IV ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ LG ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ USB ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ...

Page 27: ... ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺪﺕ ﹼ ﺗﺠﻤ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ 11 ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺏ ﻟﻢ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺪﺕ ﹼ ﺗﺠﻤ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﹴ ﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴ 12 ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﹴ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ 3 ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ 12 ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﺪ ﺇﺫ ﺗﺸﻐ...

Page 28: ...ﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺗﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻻ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺃﺳﻚ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓ...

Page 29: ...ﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﹰ ﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﹼﺭ ﺬ ﺗﻌ ﹴ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ 5 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ...

Page 30: ...ﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﻠﻢ ﻣﻠﻢ 3 5 3 5 ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ Flash Flash ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ micro SD micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ SIM SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ...

Page 31: ...ﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ 1 ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺃﺯﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ 2 SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻞ ﹺ ﺧ ﺃﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﹼ ﻥ ﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ...

Page 32: ... ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 3 ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ 4 ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﻋﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ...

Page 33: ... ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ 1 USB ﺩﺍﺧﻞ 2 ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ USB ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺘﺠﻪ USB ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﹰ ﻻ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ...

Page 34: ...ﻲ LED ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ USB ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻤﻢ ﹸ ﺻ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻷﻥ ﺍ ﹰ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻀﻊ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺿﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ LCD ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ...

Page 35: ...33 1 micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﹼ ﻥ ﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ 2 ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ...

Page 36: ... ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺳﻮﺃ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺃﻭ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ SD SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ SD SD ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ 2 microSD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﺯﻝ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻭﺇﻻ ﹰ ﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻻ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ micro SD ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ micro...

Page 37: ... 3 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﹰ ﺓ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﹰ ﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻷﻥ Android ﻣﻊ ﹰ ﻼ ﺳﻬ ﹰ ﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻌﺪ ﹸ ﻳ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻻ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗ...

Page 38: ...ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2 ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ MHL ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ MHL ﹼ ﻥ ﺇ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ MHL ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﹼ ﻥ ﺇ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ 5 ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ 1080 ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ...

Page 39: ...ﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻﹰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺎ ًّ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻞ ﺳﻴﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ ﹰ ﺔ ﹼﻨ ﻜ ﻣﻤ MHL ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻﹰ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻞ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻠﻦ MHL ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ MHL HDMI ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹸ ﻳ ﻟﻢ ...

Page 40: ...ﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤ...

Page 41: ...ﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﻌﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻻ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﹴ ﻛﺎﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀ...

Page 42: ... ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ LG P936 ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺃﻳﻀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ 30 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎ...

Page 43: ...ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ 30 ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋ...

Page 44: ...ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ...

Page 45: ...ﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 4 ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻪ 5 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ ﹰ ﺪ ﺟﺪﻳ ﺍ ﹰ ﺰ ﺭﻣ ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ...

Page 46: ...ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ 1 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍ ﹰ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎ...

Page 47: ... ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ GPS ﻭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ...

Page 48: ...ﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻟﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ USB ﻛﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ...

Page 49: ...ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ On Screen Phone ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ 3 ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ Gmail ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ Google talk ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺩﻡ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﺸﻂ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ Wi Fi ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ...

Page 50: ...ﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ QWERTY QWERTY ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ LG LG ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Shift Shift ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ...

Page 51: ...ﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ QWERTY QWERTY ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ LG LG ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Alt Alt ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ...

Page 52: ...ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ LG LG ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ LG ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ LG LG ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ...

Page 53: ...ﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ LG ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ T9 T9 ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ T9 ...

Page 54: ...ﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ LG ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻧﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 123 ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎ...

Page 55: ...ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﹴ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ Qwerty Qwerty ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ a ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ...

Page 56: ... Gmail ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺺ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 3 ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ Google ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺪ 4 ﺑﺨﻮﺍﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ Google ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺛﻢ 5 ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ...

Page 57: ...ﻭﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ Calendar ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ Google MapsTM ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ Google ﺧﻮﺍﺩﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻫﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ Google Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﹰ ﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻣ...

Page 58: ... ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Gmail ﻣﺜﻞ ﹰ ﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑ ﹼﺐ ﻠ ﻳﺘﻄ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ enterprise ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ...

Page 59: ...ﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Wi Fi Wi Fi ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi Fi ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ Wi Fi ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ Wi Fi Wi Fi ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 2 Wi Fi Wi Fi ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮ...

Page 60: ...ﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ WPA ﻭ WPA WPA2 PSK ﻭ WEP ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ 802 1x EAP ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ WPA2 PSK ﻭ PSK Wi Fi ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ EAP ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻠﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ Wi Fi ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍ...

Page 61: ...ﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺸﻐ...

Page 62: ... ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺮﺋﻴ ﻭﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ FTP ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻭﻗﺪ 3 0 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻫﻮ Bluetooth SIG ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ Bluetooth ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ SIG ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗ...

Page 63: ...ﻣﺔ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ 3 ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ DataPro ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻂ ﺇﻥ DataPro ﺧﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻔﺮﺽ ﹸ ﺗ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﹰ ﺀ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻦ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻻ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ...

Page 64: ...ﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ DataPro ﺧﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻔﺮﺽ ﹸ ﺗ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻂ DataPro ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻦ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﹰ ﺀ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ...

Page 65: ... Fi ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ Wi Fi Directed ﺃﻭ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﹰ ﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ 1 Wi Fi Wi Fi ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 2 ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ 3 ﺑﺎﻟﻬ...

Page 66: ...ﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ SmartShare SmartShare 2 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺿﻤﻦ 4 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘ...

Page 67: ... ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ 4 ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 5 ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﹰ ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﹰ ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ...

Page 68: ...ﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Wi Fi DMP ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ DLNA ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﹼﻨﺔ ﻜ ﺍﻟﻤﻤ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻟﻦ DLNA ﻣﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ SmartShare SmartShare ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍ...

Page 69: ... ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻢ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ SmartShare SmartShare 2 ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 4 ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ 5 ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ DLNA ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﹼﻨﺔ ﻜ ﺍﻟﻤﻤ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤ...

Page 70: ... ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ 1 ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻢ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 3 ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ 4 ﺑﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺩ ﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ...

Page 71: ... ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻼ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻢ 2 ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻃﻠﺐ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 4 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠ...

Page 72: ...ﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ...

Page 73: ...ﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ 1 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ...

Page 74: ... ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 1 ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ 3 ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 4 ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ 5 ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺣﻔ...

Page 75: ...ﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ 2 ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3 ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 4 ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﹰ ﺎ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ...

Page 76: ...ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺮﺳﻞ ﹸ ﺗ ﺷﺨﺺ 3 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ 4 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻭﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺎﺣﻚ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺎﺣﻚ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎ...

Page 77: ...ﻓﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ MMS ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﹰ ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ SMS ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﹰ ﺎ ﻭﻓﻘ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﺮﺽ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺭ ﹸ ﺪ ﻓﺴﻴﺼ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ SMS ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺣﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺣﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺎﺣﻚ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺿﺎﺣﻚ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻘﺪ...

Page 78: ...ﻦ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ Microsoft ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Exchange ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭ...

Page 79: ... ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ TLS SSL ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ TLS SSL ﺁﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﻦ SMTP SMTP ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺯﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎ...

Page 80: ...ﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓ...

Page 81: ...ﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ 5 ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ 6 ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺴﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﹰ ﻼ ﻣﺘﺼ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎ...

Page 82: ...ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ 2 ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ MS Exchange MS Exchange ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻢ ﹰ ﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ...

Page 83: ...81 ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ 1 ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ 2 ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 3 ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ...

Page 84: ...ﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻔﺮﺽ ﹸ ﺗ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ 1 ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 2 ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 4 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻋﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴ...

Page 85: ...ﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ 2 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﹰ ﻻ ﻭﺻﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ 1 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ 2 ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋ...

Page 86: ...ﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ 2 ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ 3 ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 4 ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨ...

Page 87: ...ﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﹰ ﻻ ﻭﺑﺪ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﹰ ﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﻋ ﺃﻗﻞ ﹰ ﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﻋ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ...

Page 88: ...ﻳﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ...

Page 89: ... ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻝ ﹼ ﻳﺘﺤﻮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ 5 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﹼﺰ ﻛ ﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ 6 ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺯﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﺎ...

Page 90: ... ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗ...

Page 91: ...ﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﹰ ﻼ ﻟﻴ ﹰ ﻼ ﻟﻴ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ISO ISO 100 100 ﻭ 200 200 ﻭ 400 400 ﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﻏﺎ...

Page 92: ...ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺍ ﹰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻢ ﹴ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ...

Page 93: ... ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺯﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺓﻡﺉﺍﻕﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ...

Page 94: ...ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 1 ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2 ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﻛـ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻗﻢ 4 ﺣﻔﻆ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ...

Page 95: ...ﻭﺑﺪ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭ ﹼ ﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﹰ ﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﻋ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﹰ ﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﻋ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ...

Page 96: ...ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ...

Page 97: ... ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ 4 ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ 5 REC ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 6 ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﹰ ﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﹰ ﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ MMS ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍ...

Page 98: ... ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ HD 1280X720 ﻭ Full HD 1920X1088 ﻣﻦ QVGA 320X240 ﻭ VGA 640X480 ﻭ TV 720X480 QCIF 176X144 MMS ﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻗﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ...

Page 99: ...ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ 2 ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ 3 ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ...

Page 100: ...ﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ﹰ ﺀ ﺑﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗ...

Page 101: ...ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ 3 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ Gmail Gmail ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﹴ ﺬ ﺑﻌﺪﺋ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ 1 ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﹴ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻄ...

Page 102: ...ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ USB ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ USB ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ 1 USB ﻣﻦ 2 USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎ...

Page 103: ...ﻞ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﹼﻞ ﻐ ﻣﺸ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ...

Page 104: ...ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﹼ ﻥ ﺃ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﻗﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺩ ﹼ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴ...

Page 105: ...ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ 1 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 2 ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐ...

Page 106: ...ﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 2 ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻗﺪ ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫ...

Page 107: ...ogle Maps ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 2 ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ...

Page 108: ...ﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ 2 ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﻮﻳﻮﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ 3 ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ Wi ...

Page 109: ...ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻙ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻙ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ...

Page 110: ...ﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ Google Latitude Google LatitudeTM TM ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ Google Latitude ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ...

Page 111: ... ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺗﻬﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﻢ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻟﺪﻋﻮﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﻢ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻟﺪﻋﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻟﻸﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺼﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻋﻮﺗﻬﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﺇ...

Page 112: ...ogle Maps ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ...

Page 113: ...ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 1 Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﻟـ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺭ 2 ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﺑﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺒﻴﻌ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴ...

Page 114: ...ﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ Gmail ﻣﺮﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ Gmail ...

Page 115: ...ﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Gmail ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺿﻤﻦ Google Talk ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﻮ Google Talk ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ Google ﹰ ﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ GoogleTalk ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻳ...

Page 116: ... ﺑﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ GoogleTalk ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ GoogleTalk ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ Google Talk ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ...

Page 117: ...ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻ ﺃﻡ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ Google Talk ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ 2 ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺿﻊ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ GoogleTalk ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ Google Talk ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪ...

Page 118: ...4 ﺣﻔﻆ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ 5 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 2 ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ 3 ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍ ﹰ ﺪ ﺗﻌﻘﻴ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ 4 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐ...

Page 119: ...ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ 3 ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ 4 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ 5 ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ 6 ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ 7 ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗ ﺻﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺼﺪﺭ ﹸ ﺳﻴ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ...

Page 120: ...ﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ xlsx xls docx doc txt ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ pdf pptx ppt ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ Polaris Office Polaris Office ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻞ ﹼ ﺳﺠ 2 ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ 3 ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ 4 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠ...

Page 121: ...ﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ 3 ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ 4 ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍ...

Page 122: ...ﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2 ﻟﺘﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ 3 ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻓﻘﻴ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍ...

Page 123: ...ﻂ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 2 ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﻚ ﻗﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻗﻞ ﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻞ ﹼ ﻣﺴﺠ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻞ ﹼ ﻣﺴﺠ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮ...

Page 124: ... ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ Gmail Gmail ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻠﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤ...

Page 125: ...123 ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ...

Page 126: ...ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻞ ﱢ ﻳﺴﻬ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘ...

Page 127: ...ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺷﺄﻥ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻌﺮﻑ ﹸ ﻳ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ RSS ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ RSS ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﹰ ﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ RSS ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻻﺷﺘ...

Page 128: ... ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 1 URL ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺑﺠﻮﺍ...

Page 129: ...127 ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ URL ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ...

Page 130: ... ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ LG Home Panorama ﻟﺒﺪﺀ On Screen Phone On Screen Phone ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ On Screen Phone ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ On Screen Phone ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ On Screen Phone ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜ...

Page 131: ... OSP ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ LG Home Panorama LG Home Panorama ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ LG Home ﺑـ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺎ ﹰ ﺟ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ﺍ ﹰ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﻮ LG Home ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ LG Home ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Panorama ﻋﻠﻰ On Screen Phone ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ LG htt...

Page 132: ...ﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ Phone On Screen Phone On Screen Phone ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ On Screen ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ Wi Fi ﻋﺒﺮ Phone ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ DataPro ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺨﻄﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟ...

Page 133: ...ﺩ On Screen Phone ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﹰ ﻻ ﻭﺑﺪ On Screen Phone ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ On Screen Phone On Screen Phone ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ On Screen Phone On Screen Phone ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ...

Page 134: ...ﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ 2 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ 1 ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi F...

Page 135: ...ﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺮﺋﻴ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ Wi Fi ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ VPN VPN ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﹰ ﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ VPNs ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ VPN ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ...

Page 136: ...ﻤﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ...

Page 137: ...ﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻤﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﻘ...

Page 138: ...ﻤﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ GPS GPS ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ GPS ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﻣﻦ ﹰ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻼ ﻛـ...

Page 139: ...ﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ...

Page 140: ... ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻫﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺎ ﹰ ﺒ ﻣﻄﺎﻟ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﹸﺮ ﻛ ﺗ...

Page 141: ...y ﺳﻮﻕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﻕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Play ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ...

Page 142: ...ﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ SD ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻳﻀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ micro SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ micro SD ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻗﻢ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟ...

Page 143: ...ﻨﻚ USB USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺩﺭﺟﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ On Screen Phone On Screen Phone ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ On Screen Phone ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 128 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ On Screen Phone ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﻧﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ...

Page 144: ...ﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺈﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﹰ ﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴ LG ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ OTA ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ OTA ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻻ USB ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ LG ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺗﺎﺣﺖ ﺗﺘﻴﺤﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ ﻻ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ...

Page 145: ...ﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻱ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ DRM ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ LG ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﻟﺬﺍ LG ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ...

Page 146: ...ﺍ Corporation ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ DivX ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﹼﻞ ﻐ ﻳﺸ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ www divx com ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ DivX ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ DIVX ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ DivX ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ DivX Certified ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ VOD ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ DivXVOD ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ vod divx com ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻚ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻮ...

Page 147: ... Certified ﻭ DivX ﺃﻭ Rovi Corporation ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ Dolby Mobile Dolby Laboratories ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ D ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ Dolby Dolby Laboratories ﻟـ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ...

Page 148: ... ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ LG P936 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺮﻑ LG P936 ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ LG ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﹰ ﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ...

Page 149: ...sued Date Doo Haeng Lee Director 19 Mar 2012 Signature of representative Declaration Supplementary Information Applicable Standards Details Product Details Suppliers Details Trade Name Model Name Product Name Address Name LG Electronics Inc LG Twin Tower 20 Yeouido dong Yeongdeungpo gu Seoul Korea 150 721 R TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EN 301 489 01 V1 8 1 EN 301 489 7 V 1 3 1 EN 301 489 17 V 2 1 1 EN ...

Page 150: ...ﻴﺮ SIM ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﹼﻞ ﻐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻪ ﹼ ﺟ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍ ﹰ ﺷﻬﺮ 12 6 ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﺮﻉ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ...

Page 151: ...ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﻥ ﻻ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺒﻞ ﹺ ﻗ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﹼ ﻥ ﺃ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﹼﺮ ﻓ ﺑﻤﻮ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ...

Page 152: ...ﺗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺎ ﹰ ﻣ ﻣﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺡ ﹼ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ PIN2 ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﹼﺭ ﺬ ﻳﺘﻌ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﹰ ﺍ ﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﻒ ﹼ ﻧﻈ ...

Page 153: ...ﻭ ﹰ ﺍ ﺟﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﹰ ﺍ ﺟﺪ ﻣﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ LG ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ...

Page 154: ...ﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻻ SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ FAT16 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ FAT32 ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﹰ ﺀ ﻏﻄﺎ ﺃﻭ ﹰ ﺎ ﺷﺮﻳﻄ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷ...

Page 155: ...ﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺪ ﹼ ﺗﺠﻤ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﹰ ﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﹼ ﻥ ﺇ ﻭﻻ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ 1 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﺰﻉ 2 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﻢ 3 ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ 4 ﹰ ﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ 5 ...

Page 156: ......

Page 157: ... ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺭﺍ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻧﺎﺑﯿﻨﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ LG ﺁﺭﻡ ﻭ LG ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ LG Electronics Inc 2012 ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻖ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻭ LG Group ﺷﺪﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﯿﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ Play ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ Maps Gmail YouTube...

Page 158: ...34 micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ 34 microSD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ 35 ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ 36 MHL 38 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 38 ﳌﺴﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ 39 ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎی 40 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ 41 ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ 41 ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 42 ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ 43 ﺍﺧﯿﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ 44 ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 45 ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ 48 ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 52 ﻣﱳ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ 52 123 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ 53 ﺩﺍﺭ ...

Page 159: ...ﺼﺎﻝ 62 ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ 63 Wi Fi Direct 63 Wi Fi ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 64 Smartshare 69 ﻫﺎ ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﲤﺎﺱ 69 ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی 69 ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﲤﺎﺱ 69 ﺁﻥ ﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 70 ﲤﺎﺱ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ 70 ﺩﻭﻡ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی 71 ﲤﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ 72 ﲤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ 73 ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ 73 ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی 73 ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ 73 ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ 75 ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ 75 ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ 77 ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ...

Page 160: ...89 ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ 89 ﮔﺮﻓﺘﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ 90 ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 93 ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ 94 ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ 95 ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ 95 ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ 97 ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ 97 ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ 98 ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 99 ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﲤﺎﺷﺎی 99 ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ 10 100 ﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ 100 ﮔﺎﻟﺮی 101 ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ 102 ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 102 ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺸ...

Page 161: ... ﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی 106 ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی 10 108 ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 108 ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ 108 Google MapsTM 109 ﻫﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی 110 ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ 111 ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ 111 ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎک 112 ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﺋﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ 113 ﻫﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ 114 Play ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ 116 Gmail 117 Google Talk 12 120 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 120 ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ 120 ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 121 ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ 12...

Page 162: ...n Screen Phone On Screen Phone 132 LG On Screen Phone 2 0 13 136 ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ 136 ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ 138 ﲤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ 138 ﺻﺪﺍ 139 ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ 140 ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﳕﺎﺩ 140 ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ 143 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 144 ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 144 ﺣﺮﯾﻢ 144 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ 145 ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ 145 ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی 145 ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ 145 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ 146 ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ 146 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ...

Page 163: ...ﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ LG ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ 147 OTA ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ 14 149 ﲡﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﲡﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ 149 DivX ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 150 Dolby Mobile 15 151 ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ 15 152 ﻓﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ 15 153 ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﯿﺐ ...

Page 164: ... ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭ ﺳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ SAR ﯾﺎ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ SAR ﻫﺎی ﺗﺴﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﻧﯿﺮﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ SAR ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮ...

Page 165: ...ﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﺮی ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻤﺮی ﮐﯿﻒ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ 1 5 ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﯾﺴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻠﺰی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﭼﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﯿﻔﺘﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ...

Page 166: ...ﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﮕﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺏ ﺍی ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﹰ ﺎ ﺣﺘﻤ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﹰ ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﯿﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺑ...

Page 167: ...ﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺗﯿﺰ ﻧﻮک ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺮﯾﺪﮔﯽ ﻟﺐ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﯽ ﺗﺮک ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺷﯿﺸﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺷﯿﺸﻪ ﺩﯾﺪﮔﯽ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳ...

Page 168: ...ﯾﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﻏﯿﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮐﻨ...

Page 169: ...ﺪ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﺪ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺷﻨﻮﯾﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐ...

Page 170: ...ﺩﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺮﻭی ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻗﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮔﯿﺮی ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﯿﻤﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧ...

Page 171: ...ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ LG ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺍی ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑ...

Page 172: ...ﻮﺏ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻄﻔ ﺑﯿﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﯾﺪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﯿﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﯾﺪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﮔﺮ LG ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ Electronics ...

Page 173: ...ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ 3 ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ 2 ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژﻫﺎ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ...

Page 174: ... ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ 2 ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻋﺪﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﺭ 2 ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﯿﺮﻭﯾﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑ...

Page 175: ...ﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی Play ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺭﺥ ﺟﺪی ﺧﻄﺎی ﯾﺎ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﯿﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 4 ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭ...

Page 176: ... ﻧﻤﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﯾﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﺳﻌﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺭ 5 ﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺪ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ...

Page 177: ...ﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی micro ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻏﯿﺮﺍﯾﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ micro ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ SD micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺩﺍ...

Page 178: ...B ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ USB ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ micro ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ SD LG PC ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ 8 Suite ﮐﻤﮏ...

Page 179: ...ﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی LG ﻭﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ 1 www lg com ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ 2 ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ LG P936 ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ 3 ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ PC Sync PC Sync ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی Download Download ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی WINDOW PC Sync Download WINDOW PC Sync Download ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی WINDOW PC Sync WINDOW...

Page 180: ...ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ USB ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ LG ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ LG PC ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ LG ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ Suite ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ 9 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ LCD ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 10 ﺻﺎﻑ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ...

Page 181: ...ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ 12 ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ 3 ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ 12 ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺭﺥ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ...

Page 182: ...ﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺣﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻼ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗ...

Page 183: ... ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺻﺒﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ 5 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ...

Page 184: ...ﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﺮی ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی ﻣﯿﻠﯽ 3 5 3 5 ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺟﮏ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺟﮏ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ MicroSD MicroSD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺟﺎی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ...

Page 185: ...ﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻧﻮک 1 ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺟﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ 2 ﺭﻧﮓ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ...

Page 186: ...ﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ 4 ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﯾﺶ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺏ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ...

Page 187: ... ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ 2 ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ USB ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﹰ ﻼ ﮐﺎﻣ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ...

Page 188: ...ﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﻣﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﯾﺪﮔﯽ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ LCD ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ LG P93...

Page 189: ...33 ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 1 micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﯾﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﻗﺖ 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ...

Page 190: ...ﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﺪ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﯾﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ micro SD ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ 2 microSD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی micro ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻏﯿﺮﺍﯾﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ...

Page 191: ...ﺩﻥ ﭘﺎک ﭼﯿﺰ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎک ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ Android ﺑﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﯾﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻇﺎﯾﻒ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺍ...

Page 192: ... ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻭی 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ MHL ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺩی ﺍچ ﭘﯿﻮﻧﺪ MHL ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﻦ 5 ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ MHL ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ...

Page 193: ... ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ MHL ﮐﻪ HDTV ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ MHL ﺩﺍﺭﺍی HDTV ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﮕﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ MHL HDMI ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ...

Page 194: ... ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻥ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺳﯿﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺮ...

Page 195: ...ﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻮﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﯿﺰﯾﮑﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻼﯾﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻧﻮک ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﯾﺎ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ...

Page 196: ...ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻮﯾﯽ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻪ ﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ...

Page 197: ...ﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﮐﻠ...

Page 198: ...ﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی 1 ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍ...

Page 199: ...ﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭘﺎک ﯾﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎ...

Page 200: ...ﯿﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﯽ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﯿﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ GPS ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ Wi Fi ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ...

Page 201: ...ﻮﯾﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﹰ ﻻ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗ...

Page 202: ...ﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ GPS GPS ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ...

Page 203: ... ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ Gmail ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ GoogleTalk ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ USB ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ Wi Fi ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﻭ USB ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ Wi Fi ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ...

Page 204: ...ﺍ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ LG LG ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﯾﮏ shift shift ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ...

Page 205: ...ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ LG LG ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ Alt Alt ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ...

Page 206: ...ﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ LG LG ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ LG ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺶ LG LG ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣ...

Page 207: ... ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ LG ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ T9 ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ T9 T9 ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐ...

Page 208: ... ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ LG ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﺮﺍی 123 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﹰ ﻼ ﻣﺜ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﯾﻌﺘﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭ...

Page 209: ... ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ á ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ a ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ...

Page 210: ...ﯾﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭی 3 ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻌﺪی ﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ 4 ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ 5 ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﻧﺒﺎ...

Page 211: ... ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ Picasa ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ MapsTM ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی Play ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎ...

Page 212: ...ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭی ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ Play ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ TM ﯾﺎ Gmail ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﯾﮏ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﯾﮏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ IT ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺁﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ...

Page 213: ...ﻠﯿﮏ ﯾﺎ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ Wi Fi Wi Fi ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ Wi Fi ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ Wi Fi Wi Fi ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ 2 Wi Fi Wi Fi ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ Wi Fi...

Page 214: ...i Fi ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ WEP WPA WPA2 PSK WPA ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ 802 1x EAP ﻭ PSK WPA2 Only PSK ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ EAP ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ Wi Fi ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻣﺰی ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧ...

Page 215: ...ﺮﺍی ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺭﻭی ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃ...

Page 216: ...ﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ FTP FTP ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ FTP FTP ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ...

Page 217: ...ﮕﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ 120 ﻣﺪﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ HFP HSP ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ PBAP ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ A2DP AVRCP OPP FTP ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ USB USB ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی 1 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ...

Page 218: ...ﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ USB USB ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 8 ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی...

Page 219: ... ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ WLAN ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ WLAN WLAN ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ 1 ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ Wi Fi Direct Wi Fi Direct Wi Fi Direct Wi Fi Direct ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ 2 ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ 3 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘ...

Page 220: ...ﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﺬﯾﺮﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ Smartshare ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﮕﯽ DLNA ﺁﻭﺭی ﻓﻦ ﺍﺯ SmartShare SmartShare ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎ...

Page 221: ...ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ 4 ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﯾﻨﮏ 5 SmartShare SmartShare ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ...

Page 222: ...ﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭی 5 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی 1 ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﭼ...

Page 223: ...ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ 1 SmartShare SmartShare ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭی 2 ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨ...

Page 224: ...re SmartShare ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﮏ 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﯾﮏ 5 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ DLNA ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ...

Page 225: ...ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ 1 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ 2 ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤ...

Page 226: ... ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﺬﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺬﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﺬﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺱ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ...

Page 227: ...ﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍی ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮔﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬ...

Page 228: ...ﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺎ ﲤﺎﺱ ...

Page 229: ...ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ 2 ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﯾﮑﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭی 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ 5 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺫ...

Page 230: ...ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی 1 ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ 2 ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﺭﻭی 3 ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی 4 ﻭ ﺁﯾﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣ...

Page 231: ...ﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺯﺍی ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﺍی 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ 4 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ...

Page 232: ...ﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍی ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ 160 ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ SMS ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ MMS ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ SMS ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺒﺨﺸﯿﺪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ...

Page 233: ...ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync ﻭ POP3 IMAP ﺷﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭی ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Microsoft Exchange ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک...

Page 234: ...ﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ TLS SSL ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ TLS SSL ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ SMTP SMTP ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻌﺪ...

Page 235: ...ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﻨ...

Page 236: ...ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی 6 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻫﻮﺍ...

Page 237: ... ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﯾﮏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی 1 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ MS Exchange MS Exchange ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻗﺒ...

Page 238: ...ﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﯾﮏ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی 1 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 2 ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ 3 ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ...

Page 239: ...ﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ Myspace ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﯾﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻼﯾﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ...

Page 240: ...ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﭘﺎک ﯾﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ 2 Social ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ 1 Social ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﻫﺎ...

Page 241: ...ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ 1 ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍی ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ 2 ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿ...

Page 242: ...ﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺬﻑ 1 ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﻭ 2 ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ...

Page 243: ...ﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ...

Page 244: ...ﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ...

Page 245: ... ﻃﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ 4 ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ 5 ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ 6 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﻔﺘﺪ ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭ...

Page 246: ...ﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ...

Page 247: ...ﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﺎﺩی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﮔﻞ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺐ ﺷﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺷ...

Page 248: ...ﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻫﺎیﻋﺎﺩی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺻﺪﺍی ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺟﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ...

Page 249: ...ﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﯾﮏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮی ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﯿﺶ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ...

Page 250: ...ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﻣﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﻭی 1 ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی 2 ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ 3 ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ...

Page 251: ...ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ...

Page 252: ...ﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ...

Page 253: ... ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﯽ ﺍﯾﺪ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﯾﮏ 4 ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﯾﮏ 5 ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ REC ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ 6 ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ...

Page 254: ...ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ Full HD 1920X1088 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ HD 1280X720 TV 720X480 VGA 640X480 QVGA 320X24...

Page 255: ...ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی 1 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ 2 ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﻭی 3 ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ...

Page 256: ...ﻟﯽ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎی ﯾﮏ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﯽ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ...

Page 257: ... ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 2 ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 3 ﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﯾﺎ Gmail Gmail ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﯾﮏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ...

Page 258: ...ﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﯾ...

Page 259: ...ﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ 4 ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﮐ...

Page 260: ...ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ smi ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺣﻖ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ...

Page 261: ...ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﯾﮏ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ﺍی ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎ...

Page 262: ...ﯿﺮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی 1 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﮏ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ 2 ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻭی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺎ...

Page 263: ...ﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻠﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺧﺬ ﺑﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻄﻔ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ...

Page 264: ...ﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ Google MapsTM ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ Google Maps ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺭﻭی 2 ﻣﻦ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃ...

Page 265: ...ﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ 1 ﺭﻭی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﯾﮏ ﻭ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﯿﻮﯾﻮ...

Page 266: ...ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎی ﯾﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﯾﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﻭ ﭘﯿﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎی 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺴ...

Page 267: ...ﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﻣﯽ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﯿﺎﺑﯿﺪ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﭙﺲ ...

Page 268: ... ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﺑﭙﯿﻮﻧﺪﯾﺪ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﭙﺬﯾﺮﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺣﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﻮﻧﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭی ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻣﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺳﯿﺎﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﭙﺬﯾﺮﯾﺪ...

Page 269: ...ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺎ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺟ...

Page 270: ...ﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ Play ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﯿﺎﺑﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی...

Page 271: ...ﺪ 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﯿﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ 5 ﻗﯿﻤﺖ ﻗﯿﻤﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻏﯿﺮﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻏﯿﺮﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ Google CheckoutTM ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ...

Page 272: ...ﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ GmailTM ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ GmailTM ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ GmailTM ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺎ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﻮﺳﺎﺯی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ...

Page 273: ...ﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭼﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﭼﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﭼﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﯽ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﯾﺪ ...

Page 274: ...ﺪ ﭼﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی 3 ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭼﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ 2 ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾ...

Page 275: ...ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﯽ Google Talk ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی Google Talk ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ 2 ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ...

Page 276: ...ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی 5 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻋﺪﺩی ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ 3 ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﯾﺎ x ﻭ 4 ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺮ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍ...

Page 277: ...ﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ 3 ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ 4 ﮐﺠﺎ ﮐﺠﺎ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ 5 ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ 6 ﯾﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﯾﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ 7 ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ...

Page 278: ...ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺍﺯ Polaris Office ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ txt doc docx xls xlsx ppt pptx pdf ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ Polaris Office Polaris Office ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ 2 ﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻮﺩ 3 micro SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ...

Page 279: ... ﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﮔﺮ 3 ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ 4 ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ...

Page 280: ...ﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ 1 ﺭﻭی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭی 2 ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی 3 ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻠﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ...

Page 281: ...ﺭﻭی 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻋﻼﻡ 2 Say a command Say a command ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﺑﮕﻮﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ 3 ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻭﺏ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻫﺎی ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺕ ﯾﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﯾﮏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎ...

Page 282: ...mail Gmail ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺪﺭﯾﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻮﺩ ...

Page 283: ...127 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 4 ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ...

Page 284: ...ﯾﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﺮ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﯾ...

Page 285: ... ﭘﺎﺩﮐﺴﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﯿﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﻭﺏ ﺧﺒﺮی ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺧﺒﺮی ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﮐﻪ RSS ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻭﺏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍی ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻭﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ RSS ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ RSS ﺩﺭ ﺧﺒﺮی ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮی ﺩﺭ RSS ...

Page 286: ...ﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨ...

Page 287: ...ﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ URL ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ URL ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ...

Page 288: ...ﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ LG Home Panorama ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ On Screen Phone ﺑﺮﮔﺰﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺭﺍ On Screen Phone ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ On Screen Phone ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ On Screen Phone ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ On Screen Phone ﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣ...

Page 289: ...ﻫﺎ On Screen Phone ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ OSP ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ LG ﮐﺎﺭی ﻓﻀﺎی ﮐﻞ LG Home Panorama LG Home Panorama ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ Home ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ LG Home ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ LG ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ Home Panorama ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ On Screen Phone ...

Page 290: ...e ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ On Screen Phone ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ Wi Fi ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ DataPro ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ Wi Fi ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻓ...

Page 291: ...ﺍ On Screen Phone ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ On Screen Phone ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ On Screen Phone On Screen Phone ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ On Screen Phone On Screen Phone ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ...

Page 292: ... ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺁﺑﯽ 2 ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ 1 ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ 2 ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ Wi Fi Wi Fi Wi Fi ﮐﻨﯿ...

Page 293: ... ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ Wi Fi ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ VPN VPN ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾ...

Page 294: ...ﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﯿﺮ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﯾﺎ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻟﻤ...

Page 295: ...ﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ LED LED ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﻠﻮی LED ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﻬﯿﻨ...

Page 296: ...ﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻌﺪی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﮑﺚ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ...

Page 297: ...ﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﻦ ﺳﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎی ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎی ﯾﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﯾﺮ...

Page 298: ...ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺭ 5 ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺴﭙﺎﺭﯾﺪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ 30 ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻧﺸﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ 5 ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ...

Page 299: ...ﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ 4 ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻭﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ Play ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﺎی ...

Page 300: ...ﭼﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺍی ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺣﺮﯾﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺎک ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ mic...

Page 301: ...ﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻼﮔﯿﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻼﮔﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ USB USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﻭی ...

Page 302: ...6 ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ...

Page 303: ...ﺷﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻄﻔ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﯾﺎ USB ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪی ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ LG ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ OTA ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ OTA ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﻪ USB ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ LG ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ...

Page 304: ...ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻭ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ DRM ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ LG ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻫﺎی...

Page 305: ...VIDEO ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺯ DivX LLC ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ Rovi Corporation ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ DivX Certified ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ DivX ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ divx com ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﺑﻪ DivX ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ DIVXVIDEO ON DEMAND ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ DivX Certified ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ DivX Video on Demand...

Page 306: ... ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ 720P 720P ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﺭﻡ ﻭ DivX DivX Certified ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻭ Rovi Corporation ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭ Dolby Mobile Dolby Laboratories ﻟﯿﺴﺎﻧﺲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ Dolby ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ D ﺩﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻭ Dolby ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ Laboratories ﲡﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ...

Page 307: ...ﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ LG P936 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ LG P936 ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﯾﻮ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﯾﻮ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ LG ﺍﺻﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ...

Page 308: ...Haeng Lee Director 19 Mar 2012 Signature of representative Declaration Supplementary Information Applicable Standards Details Product Details Suppliers Details Trade Name Model Name Product Name Address Name LG Electronics Inc LG Twin Tower 20 Yeouido dong Yeongdeungpo gu Seoul Korea 150 721 R TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EN 301 489 01 V1 8 1 EN 301 489 7 V 1 3 1 EN 301 489 17 V 2 1 1 EN 301 489 19 V 1...

Page 309: ...ﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﯾﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﯾﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﻩ 12 ﺗﺎ 6 ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ...

Page 310: ...ﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪی ﺩﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﯾﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﯿﺐ ...

Page 311: ...ﺳﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺭﺍ PIN 2 ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺜﯿﻒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭘﺎک ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ...

Page 312: ...ﺘﺎژ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﯿﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﯿﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ LG ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ...

Page 313: ...ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻭ SMS ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ FAT16 ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ FAT32 ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ SD ...

Page 314: ...ﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﯾﺎ ﮐﯿﻒ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﯿﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻤﯿﺰ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﯿﺼﺪﺍ ﯾﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ ...

Page 315: ...ﻫﺎی ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺭﺍﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 1 ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﻭﮐﺶ 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی 3 ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﺏ 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ 5 ...

Page 316: ......

Page 317: ...ftware and your service provider This handset is not recommended for the visually impaired because of its touch screen keyboard Copyright 2012 LG Electronics Inc All rights reserved LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Google Maps Gmail YouTube Google Talk and Play Store are trademarks of ...

Page 318: ...ro SD card 36 Formatting the microSD card 37 Switching between and exiting applications 38 MHL 39 Your Home screen 41 Touch screen tips 41 Proximity sensors 43 Lock your phone 43 Quick Switch to Silent Mode 44 Home 45 Customizing your Home screen 45 Getting back to a recently used application 47 Notifications panel 47 Viewing the Status bar 49 On screen Keyboard 51 Entering text 55 123 Mode 56 Tabl...

Page 319: ...i 60 Bluetooth 62 Data Tethering 64 Mobile Hotspots 65 Wi Fi Direct 66 Wi Fi Share 67 Smartshare 67 Calls 72 Making a call 72 Calling your contacts 72 Answering and rejecting a call 72 Adjusting the in call volume 73 Making a second call 73 Viewing your call logs 74 Call settings 74 Contacts 76 Searching for a contact 76 Adding a new contact 76 Favourite Contacts 77 ...

Page 320: ...phone 88 Removing accounts on your phone 89 Camera 90 Getting to know the viewfinder 90 Taking a photo 92 Once you ve taken the photo 92 Using the advanced settings 93 Viewing your saved photos 96 Setting a photo as wallpaper 97 Video Camera 98 Getting to know the viewfinder 98 Recording a video 100 After recording a video 100 Using the advanced settings 101 Watching your saved videos 102 Adjusting ...

Page 321: ...sic video files to the phone 107 How to play music video files on the phone 108 Playing a song 108 Working with Playlists 108 To remove a song from a playlist 109 To rename or delete a playlist 110 Google Applications 111 About Google applications 111 Google Maps 111 Searching For Locations and Places 112 Getting Directions 113 My Places 114 Clear Map 114 Latitude 115 Places 116 Play Store 117 ...

Page 322: ...s Office 125 Voice Control 128 Voice recorder 129 App Manager 129 The Web 131 Browser 131 Using options 132 Adding bookmarks 133 Changing the Browser settings 134 On Screen Phone 135 LG On Screen Phone 2 0 135 Settings 139 Wireless networks 139 Call settings 140 Sound 141 Display 142 Gesture 142 Location security 143 Applications 146 Accounts sync 147 ...

Page 323: ...ssibility 148 Connectivity settings 148 Date time 149 About phone 149 Software Update 150 Phone Software Update 150 LG Mobile Phone Software update via Over the Air OTA 150 Copyrights and trademarks 152 DivX Mobile 152 Dolby Mobile 153 Accessories 154 Technical data 155 Troubleshooting 156 ...

Page 324: ...all persons regardless of age and health The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR Tests for SAR are conducted using standardised methods with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models they are all designed...

Page 325: ...uld position the product at least 1 5 cm away from your body In order to transmit data files or messages this device requires a quality connection to the network In some cases transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed Product care and maintenance WARNI...

Page 326: ...ios and personal computers The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers Do not drop Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock Switch off the phone in any area where you are required to do so by special regulations For example do not use your phone in hospitals as it may affect sensitive medical equipment Do not handle the phone with wet hands while it...

Page 327: ... it can affect the information on the magnetic strips Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture Use the accessories like earphones cautiously Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily Do not use touch or attempt to remove or fix broken chipped or cracked glass Damage to the glass display due to abuse or misuse is not covered und...

Page 328: ...quipment without requesting permission Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers for example in your breast pocket Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones Minor interference may affect TVs radios PCs etc Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the area when you drive Do not use a hand held phone while driving Give full attention to driving Pull off the...

Page 329: ...s This is particularly imperative when near roads Avoid damage to your hearing Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time We therefore recommend that you do not turn the handset on or off when close to your ear We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level When using headphones turn the volume down if you cannot hear the...

Page 330: ...laced by an authorised service provider Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress Observe restrictions and follow any regulations or rules Potentially explosive atmospheres Do not use the phone at a refuelling point Do not use near fuel or chemicals Do not transport or store flammable gas liquid or explosives in the same compartment of your vehicle as your mobile phone and a...

Page 331: ...erefore you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls Check with your local service provider Battery information and care You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging Unlike other battery systems there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery s performance Use only LG batteries and chargers LG chargers are designed to maximise the battery lif...

Page 332: ...the battery in hot or cold places as this may deteriorate the battery performance There is risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Please recycle when possible Do not dispose as household waste If you need to replace the battery take it to the nearest authorised LG Electronics service point or dealer f...

Page 333: ...17 configuration product settings usage patterns battery and environmental conditions ...

Page 334: ...lete some data such as applications or messages Managing Applications 1 From the Home screen tap the Menu Key and tap Settings Applications Manage applications 2 When the list of applications appears scroll and tap the application you want to uninstall 3 Tap Uninstall and then tap OK to confirm that you want to uninstall the desired application 2 Optimizing Battery Life You can extend your battery...

Page 335: ...ou have downloaded may cause your battery power to be reduced While using downloaded applications check the battery charged level To view the battery charge level 1 From the Home screen tap the Menu Key and tap Settings About phone Status 2 The battery status charging or not charging and level are displayed on the top menu of the screen To monitor and control what uses the battery 1 From the Home ...

Page 336: ... the operating system provided by the manufacturer can cause your phone to malfunction Warning If you install and use an OS other than the one provided by the manufacturer your phone is no longer covered by the warranty To protect your phone and personal data download applications only from trusted sources such as Play Store If some applications are not properly installed on your phone your phone ...

Page 337: ...arning Take precautions when using an Unlock Pattern PIN or Password It is very important that you remember the screen unlock information you set You are allowed 5 attempts to enter your screen unlock information If you used up all 5 opportunities you will have to wait 30 seconds to attempt unlocking the phone again When you can t recall your Unlock Pattern PIN or Password If you logged into a Goo...

Page 338: ...eds to be restored to its original condition use a Hard Reset to initialize your phone 1 Turn the power off 2 Press and hold the following keys at the same time for 8 seconds Power Lock Key Down Volume Key 3 When FACTORY HARD RESET screen is displayed release the keys 4 Press the Power Lock Key to confirm delete all user data and press the Volume Keys to cancel Warning If you perform a Hard Reset ...

Page 339: ...d a micro SD card you will not be able to save these items on external memory Warning Do not remove the micro SD card without unmounting it first Otherwise it may damage the micro SD card as well as your phone and the data stored on the micro SD card may be corrupted To remove the micro SD card safely from the Home screen tap the Menu Key and tap Settings SD card phone storage Unmount SD card ...

Page 340: ...p 2 Tap Mass storage and OK to confirm that you want to transfer files between your phone s micro SD card and the computer When the phone is connected as USB storage you receive a notification Your phone s micro SD card is installed as a drive on your computer You can now copy files to and from the micro SD card TIP You cannot access the micro SD card from your phone while connected as USB storage...

Page 341: ... data Synchronise mobile phone data with PC data contacts calendar SMS messages bookmarks and call log Easily transfer multimedia files photos videos music by simply dragging and dropping between a PC and your phone Installing LG PC Suite PC application LG PC Suite PC application can be downloaded from the webpage of LG 1 Go to www lg com and select a country of your choice 2 Go to Support Mobile ...

Page 342: ...ctions 4 When LG PC Suite IV installation is complete disable Mass storage mode to run LG PC Suite IV NOTE Do not remove or delete other program files installed on your memory card This may damage your preinstalled applications NOTE LG integrated USB driver is required to connect an LG device and PC and installed automatically when you install LG PC Suite PC software 9 Unlock screen when using dat...

Page 343: ...d It may affect call quality 11 When the screen freezes If the phone does not respond to user input or the screen freezes Press and hold the Power Lock Key for 12 seconds to turn it off Then press and hold the Power Lock Key again for 3 seconds to reboot the phone 12 Do not connect your phone when you power on off your PC Make sure to disconnect your phone from the PC when powering your PC on or o...

Page 344: ...the Home screen from any screen Earpiece Back Key Returns to the previous screen Closes pop up menus and dialog boxes Power Lock Key Powers your phone on off by pressing and holding the key Turns your screen on and off and locks it Proximity Sensors Senses proximity toward other objects such as your head during a call so that you do not accidentally activate unwanted features Front Facing Camera L...

Page 345: ...t cover the LCD s proximity sensor with a protective film This can cause the sensor to malfunction TIPS Tap the Menu Key whenever you open an application to check what options are available If your phone has errors when you use it or you cannot turn it on remove the battery install it again and turn it on after 5 seconds ...

Page 346: ...es or to adjust the in call volume during a call Press and hold the volume down key to switch to the silent mode Power Lock Key Charger Accessory Port 3 5mm Headset Jack Microphone Back Cover Flash Camera Lens micro SD Card Slot SIM Card Slot Speaker Fingertip cutout Battery ...

Page 347: ...art exploring your new phone you ll need to set it up To insert the SIM card and battery 1 Hold the phone on your hand firmly With the other hand lift the back cover using the fingertip cutout located on the bottom of the cover and remove it Getting Started ...

Page 348: ...ng Started 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards 3 Insert the battery into place by aligning the gold contacts on the phone and the battery ...

Page 349: ... Apply a steady downward pressure until the battery cover clicks into place Charging your phone 1 Connect the cabless wall adapter and USB cable 2 Plug the USB cable as shown below into the phone s charger accessory port Make sure the USB symbol is facing upwards ...

Page 350: ... turned off as the battery is fully discharged the battery is called a weak battery In this case when the phone connect to the charger TA or USB cable the keypad LED at the bottom of the phone will be blinking This is normal operation in the weak battery to prevent over current flowing because the phone is designed to provide reasonable protection algorithm for against damage of battery And after ...

Page 351: ...a and other multimedia features Multimedia contents can be saved in the micro SD card LG P936 has a micro SD card pre installed NOTE This device supports up to a 32GB micro SD card 1 Turn the phone off before inserting or removing the micro SD card Remove the back cover ...

Page 352: ...Started 2 Then insert the micro SD card into the slot Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards Removing the micro SD card To safely remove the micro SD card from your phone first you need to unmount it ...

Page 353: ...micro SD card can be corrupted or damaged 1 From the Home screen tap the Menu Key and tap Settings SD card phone storage Unmount SD card 2 Remove the battery cover and gently pull the microSD card from the slot Warning Do not remove the micro SD card without unmounting it first Otherwise it may damage the micro SD card as well as your phone and the data stored on the micro SD card may be corrupted...

Page 354: ...he card will then be formatted and ready to use NOTE If there is content on your micro SD card the folder structure may be different after formatting since all the files will have been deleted Switching between and exiting applications Multi tasking is easy with Android because open applications keep running even when you open another application There is no need to quit an application before open...

Page 355: ...ngs Applications Manage applications 2 Tap the desired application and tap Force stop to exit MHL MHL Mobile High Definition Link is a mobile audio video interface standard for connecting mobile phones and other portable consumer electronics devices to high definition televisions and displays The MHL standard features a single cable with a 5 pin interface able to support up to 1080p HD video and d...

Page 356: ...your device is connected to an MHL enabled HDTV the cable will simultaneously charge the device and output media If connected to an HDTV without MHL the cable will not charge the connected device unless an MHL HDMI adapter is used ...

Page 357: ... example to open a contact s available options touch and hold the contact in the Contacts list until the context menu opens Drag Touch and hold an item for a moment and then without lifting your finger move your finger on the screen until you reach the target position You can drag items on the Home screen to reposition them Swipe or slide To swipe or slide quickly move your finger across the surfa...

Page 358: ...to Zoom Use your index finger and thumb in a pinch or spread motion to zoom in or out when using the browser Maps or browsing pictures Rotate the screen From many applications and menus the orientation of the screen adjusts to the device s physical orientation NOTE To select an item tap the center of the icon Do not to press too hard the touch screen is sensitive enough to pick up a light firm tou...

Page 359: ...ou are not using the LG P936 press the Power Lock Key to lock your phone This helps prevent accidental presses and saves battery power Also if you do not use the phone for a while the Home screen or other screen you are viewing is automatically replaced with the lock screen after 30 seconds of inactivity to conserve the battery and prevent pocket dialing To wake up your phone press the Power Lock ...

Page 360: ...nnecessary charges e g phone call web access and data communications Setting an unlock pattern You can draw your own unlock pattern by connecting four or more dots To unlock the phone draw the pattern you set on the screen Caution If there are more than 5 pattern drawing errors in a row you will be required to wait for 30 seconds to retry Quick Switch to Silent Mode To quickly set your phone to si...

Page 361: ...n The quick keys provide easy one tap access to the functions you use the most Customizing your Home screen You can customize your Home screen by adding quick access elements such as shortcuts widgets folders to it or changing the wallpaper Widgets Add dynamically updating widgets to your Home screen to allow quick access to applications without opening the full application Shortcuts Add applicati...

Page 362: ...screen 3 Tap the type of item you want to add on the screen Widgets Shortcuts Folders or Wallpaper 4 Tap an available widget shortcut or folder 5 You will see a new icon on the Home screen To place it on a different panel drag it to the desired location on the desired panel and release your finger from the screen TIP To add a preloaded application or an application you have downloaded from Play St...

Page 363: ...e bottom of the screen You cannot delete the preloaded applications Only their icons can be deleted from the screen Getting back to a recently used application 1 Touch and hold the Home Key The screen will display the icons of applications that you have used recently 2 Tap an icon to open its application or tap the Back Key to return to the current application Notifications panel Notification icon...

Page 364: ...p of your screen Data Mode GPS Bluetooth Wi Fi Vibrate Mode Touch and hold the Status Bar and slide it down with your finger Or from the Home screen tap the Menu Key Notifications From here you can check and quickly turn on and off Silent Vibrate mode Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS and Data Mode ...

Page 365: ...tooth and data connections Below is a table explaining the meaning of icons you are likely to see in the Status bar Status bar Icon Description No SIM card inserted Icon Description No network signal available Airplane mode is on Connected to a Wi Fi network Wired headset connected Call in progress Call on hold Speakerphone is on Phone microphone is muted ...

Page 366: ... is set New voicemail available Ringer is silenced Vibrate mode is on Battery fully charged Icon Description Battery is charging Phone is connected to PC via USB cable Downloading data Uploading data GPS is on Receiving location data from GPS On Screen Phone connected 3 more notifications not displayed ...

Page 367: ...t multimedia message available Song is playing Upcoming event Icon Description USB tethering is active Portable Wi Fi hotspot is active USB tethering Portable Wi Fi hotspot are active Data in and out On screen Keyboard You can enter text using the on screen keyboard The on screen keyboard displays automatically on the screen when you need to ...

Page 368: ...ey Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type Double tap for all caps Number and Symbols Settings Key Tap to change input to number and symbol entry Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard settings Delete Key Tap to delete characters to the left of the cursor Hide Keyboard Key Tap to hide the keyboard Enter Key Tap to move the cursor to the next line ...

Page 369: ...o alternate characters Letters Settings Key Tap to change input to letters entry Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard settings Space Key Tap to enter space Delete Key Tap to delete characters to the left of the cursor Hide Keyboard Key Tap to hide the keyboard Next Key Tap to move the cursor to the next field ...

Page 370: ... Phone keypad The Phone keypad allows you to enter letters by tapping the key labeled with the desired letters similar to how you would on a traditional 12 key phone You may have to tap a key up to four times to type the desired letter or number Shift Key Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type Double tap for all caps Space Key Tap to enter space ...

Page 371: ...the keypad T9 Key Tap to turn on the T9 entry mode Entering text Shift Key Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type Double tap for all caps The coloured circle on the button tells you if uppercase is locked on or if it is just on for one character Number and Symbols Settings Key Tap to change to 123 Mode and enter numbers and symbols Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard settings Enter ...

Page 372: ...e manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode by tapping the key Entering accented letters When you select French as the text entry language you can enter special French characters e g á From Phone Keypad After the corresponding letter character disappears press the same key repeatedly until you see the special character you want From Qwerty keyboard To input the accent press and ho...

Page 373: ...mail setup wizard 3 Tap a text field to open the keyboard and enter your name and username for your Google account When you finish entering the text you can move to the next text field by tapping Next on the keyboard 4 When you re finished entering your name and username tap Next Your phone will communicate with Google servers and check for username availability 5 Enter and re enter your password ...

Page 374: ...igning in your phone will sync with your Google services such as GmailTM Contacts Google Calendar and Picasa photo albums You can also use Google MapsTM download applications from Play Store back up your settings to Google servers and take advantage of other Google services on your phone IMPORTANT Some applications such as Calendar work only with the first Google Account you add If you plan to use...

Page 375: ...oogle Account during setup you will be prompted to sign in or to create a Google Account the first time you start an application that requires one such as Gmail or Play Store If you have an enterprise account through your company or other organization your IT department may have special instructions on how to sign into that account ...

Page 376: ... panel and tap to turn Wi Fi on OR Tap the Menu Key and tap Settings Wireless networks Wi Fi To connect to a Wi Fi Network Turn off Wi Fi when you re not using it to extend the life of your battery 1 From the Home screen tap the Menu Key and tap Settings Wireless networks Wi Fi settings 2 Tap Wi Fi to turn it on and begin scanning for available Wi Fi networks A list of available Wi Fi networks wil...

Page 377: ...tes your Wi Fi status TIP If you are not in range of a Wi Fi network and use a network connection Additional data charges may apply NOTE This device supports WEP WPA WPA2 PSK WPA PSK WPA2 Only PSK and 802 1x EAP Some EAP methods are not supported If your Wi Fi service provider or network administrator sets encryption for network security enter the key in the pop up window If encryption is not set ...

Page 378: ...on on pairing mode and passcode typically 0 0 0 0 four zeroes How to send data from your phone via Bluetooth You can send data via Bluetooth by running a corresponding application not from Bluetooth menu unlike regular mobile phones Sending pictures Open the Gallery application and tap a picture Then tap Menu Share Bluetooth Check if Bluetooth is turned on and tap Scan for devices Then tap the dev...

Page 379: ...hen tap Share Bluetooth Check if Bluetooth is turned on and tap Scan for devices Then tap the device you want to send data to from the list Connecting to FTP Only the FTP server is supported on this handset From the Home screen tap the Menu Key and tap Settings Wireless networks Bluetooth settings Make sure Bluetooth is turned on Tap Discoverable to place a checkmark and make the phone visible to ...

Page 380: ...lace a checkmark and make the phone visible to other Bluetooth devices for 120 seconds Supported profiles are HFP HSP A2DP AVRCP OPP FTP Server and PBAP Data Tethering You can use your phone to provide a data connection to a computer by activating data tethering and connecting them with a USB cable To tether your phone with your computer using the USB 1 Connect your phone to your computer with a U...

Page 381: ...ors You cannot access your phone s micro SD card on your computer when using USB tethering From the Home screen tap the Menu Key and tap Settings Wireless networks Tethering portable hotspot USB tethering Mobile Hotspots You can also use your smartphone to provide a mobile broadband connection for up to 8 other devices Create a hotspot and share your connection To create a portable hotspot tap the...

Page 382: ... and other factors If you do not use a password others will be able to use your Mobile Hotspot connection Wi Fi Direct Learn to use the WLAN Direct feature to connect two devices via a WLAN without requiring an access point Connect your device to another WLAN device 1 Settings Wireless network settings Wi Fi Direct settings Wi Fi Direct 2 Press Menu Scan 3 Select a device and then select Connect W...

Page 383: ...ant to share 3 On the top of the screen you can see all devices connected with your phone Select devices you want to share with and then touch the When the other device accepts the request it starts sending Use menu key to use more of its functions Receive data When prompted select OK to confirm that you are willing to receive data Smartshare SmartShare uses DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance te...

Page 384: ...g requests from other devices Tap Receive files to allow automatically allow upload files to my phone from other devices 4 Under the Sharing contents section tap each type of content you would like to share Choose from Pictures Videos and Music 5 SmartShare is now activated and ready to share contents To share contents from remote content library to other devices Let your renderer device e g TV pl...

Page 385: ...e content library 5 Tap a content thumbnail or tap the Menu Key and tap Play button To share contents from your phone to your renderer device e g TV NOTE Make sure that your renderer device is properly configured 1 While browsing your pictures or videos using the Gallery application touch and hold to select files Then you will be able to select multiple files to be shared 2 Tap Share SmartShare Sm...

Page 386: ...NA enabled devices e g TV support only the DMP feature of DLNA and will not appear in the renderer device list Your device might not be able to play some contents To download contents from remote content library 1 Tap the Applications Key SmartShare 2 Tap the top left button and select the device of the remote content library 3 You can browse the content library 4 Tap a content thumbnail then tap ...

Page 387: ...lications Key SmartShare 2 Tap the top left button and select My phone 3 You can browse the content library 4 Touch and hold a content thumbnail and then tap the upload menu key 5 Select a device of remote content library to be uploaded NOTICE Some DLNA enabled devices do not support DMS upload functionality and will not be uploaded A few types of contents are not supported ...

Page 388: ...l calls touch and hold Calling your contacts 1 Tap to open your contacts 2 Scroll through the contact list or tap the Search box and enter the first letter s of the contact you want to call 3 In the list that is displayed tap the contact you want to call 4 In the Contact Info screen tap the phone number you wish to call Answering and rejecting a call When the screen is locked When your phone rings...

Page 389: ...ap the Excuse Msg bar upwards if you want to send a message to the caller If the caller is unknown the Excuse Msg bar is not available Adjusting the in call volume To adjust the in call volume during a call use the volume up and down keys on the left side of the phone Making a second call 1 During your initial call tap the Menu Key and select Or tap the Dialpad icon Then enter the number you want ...

Page 390: ...ed for each call you make Viewing your call logs From the Home screen tap the Call icon and the Call log tab View a complete list of all dialed received and missed voice calls TIP Tap any single call log entry to view the date time and duration of the call TIP Tap the Menu Key then tap Delete all to delete all the recorded items Call settings You can configure phone call settings such as call forw...

Page 391: ...75 1 From the Home screen tap the Menu Key and tap Settings 2 Tap Call settings ...

Page 392: ...Tap the Search field and enter the contact name using the keypad Adding a new contact 1 Tap and enter the new contact s number Tap the Menu Key tap Add to contacts and then Create new contact 2 If you want to add a picture to the new contact tap Choose from Capture picture or Pick from Gallery 3 Select the contact type by tapping 4 Tap a category of contact information and enter the details about ...

Page 393: ...Tap the star to the right of the contact s name The star turns gold and the contact is added to your favourites To remove a contact from your favourites list 1 From the Home screen tap the Applications Key and then tap to open your contacts 2 Tap the Groups tab and tap favourites 3 Tap a contact to view its details 4 Tap the gold star to the right of the contact s name The star turns grey and the ...

Page 394: ...ew message to create a new message 2 Enter a contact name or phone number in the To field As you enter the contact name matching contacts appear You can tap a suggested recipient You can also add multiple contacts NOTE You will be charged for a text message for every person you send the message to 3 Tap the text field to start entering your message 4 Tap the Menu Key to open the options menu Choos...

Page 395: ...om country to country depending on how the SMS is coded and the language used in the message Warning If an image video or audio file is added to an SMS message it will be automatically converted into an MMS message and you will be charged accordingly NOTE When you get an SMS message during a call there will be an audible notification Using smilies Liven up your messages using smilies When writing ...

Page 396: ...er than Gmail The Email application supports the following account types POP3 IMAP and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for Enterprise users To open the Email application From the Home screen tap the Applications Key Email The first time you open the Email application a setup wizard opens to help you add an Email account Microsoft Exchange Email Account Email address Enter the account email address U...

Page 397: ...ts in your Email folder POP3 IMAP4 Select protocol type either POP3 or IMAP4 Incoming server Enter the incoming email server address Secure type TLS SSL Off Port number Normally each account s default number will be displayed Outgoing server Enter the outgoing email server address SMTP Secure Connection TLS SSL Off Port number Normally each account s default number will be displayed Tap the Next b...

Page 398: ... hold an email account Then tap Add to homescreen You can tap an account to view its Inbox The default account from which you send email is indicated with a checkmark To open your Combined Inbox If you have configured email to send and receive email from more than one account you can view all messages sent to all accounts in your Combined Inbox Tap Email Combined Inbox on the Accounts screen Messa...

Page 399: ...her contacts email addresses 4 Enter the text of the message 5 Tap Attach to attach the file you want to send with your message 6 Tap Send If you are not ready to send the message tap Save to save it in a Drafts folder Touch a message in the Drafts folder to resume working on it Your message will also be saved as a draft if you touch the Back key before sending it Tap Cancel to abandon and delete ...

Page 400: ...with the Sent label you may need to open the Sent folder label and select Refresh from the options menu Working with Account Folders Each account has Inbox Outbox Sent Drafts Trash and Junk folders Depending on the features your account service provider supports you may have additional folders Adding and Editing Email Accounts To add an email account 1 Tap the Applications Key Email 2 Select MS Ex...

Page 401: ...pen the Accounts screen 2 Tap the Menu Key Settings To delete an email account 1 Open the Accounts screen 2 Touch and hold the account you want to delete 3 Tap Remove account in the menu that opens and tap Remove in the dialogue box to confirm ...

Page 402: ... Twitter and MySpace accounts to your phone If you don t have an account you can visit their sites to set one up NOTE Additional costs may be incurred when connecting and using online services Check your data charges with your network provider Adding an account to your phone 1 From the Home screen tap the Menu Key Settings Accounts sync 2 Tap Add account 3 Tap any social networking service you wan...

Page 403: ...rectly by tapping the widget 1 Touch and hold an empty spot on the Home screen NOTE If there is no available space on a particular Home screen panel you won t be able to add any widget you must delete or remove an item before you can add another item In this case you have the option of switching to another Home screen panel 2 When various Widgets appear scroll through the widget and tap Social Vie...

Page 404: ...an use information about friends only in your social network s or sync all data to Contacts Syncing accounts on your phone You can sync information from your social networking accounts with your Contacts and other functions on your phone if applicable 1 From the Home screen tap the Menu Key Settings Accounts sync Choose the account you want to synchronize and enter the necessary information 2 Chec...

Page 405: ...89 been enabled Removing accounts on your phone 1 From the Home screen tap the Menu Key Settings Accounts sync 2 Tap the account s you want to delete then tap Remove account twice ...

Page 406: ...facing cameras Zoom Zoom in or zoom out Alternatively you can use the Volume Keys Brightness This defines and controls of the amount of sunlight entering the lens Slide the brightness indicator along the bar towards for a lower brightness image or towards for a higher brightness image Flash Allows you turn on the flash when taking a photo in a dark place Camera ...

Page 407: ...ode Taking a photo Allows you to take a photo Gallery This enables you to access your saved photos and videos within the camera mode Simply tap and your Gallery will appear on the screen NOTE You can close all the shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen Just tap the center of the screen once To recall the options tap the screen again ...

Page 408: ... can see the subject in the focus box 5 When the focus box turns green the camera has focused on your subject 6 Release the Capture button NOTE A shading issue may occur when you take a picture indoors due to the characteristics of the camera Shading means a colour difference between the center and sides Once you ve taken the photo Your captured photo will appear on the screen if Auto review is se...

Page 409: ...be saved Tap to view the Gallery of your saved photos Using the advanced settings In the viewfinder tap to open the advanced options You can change the camera settings by scrolling the list After selecting the option tap the Back key Focus Tap to select the focus mode Auto Allows the camera to focus automatically Face tracking The camera detects and focuses on human faces automatically Image size ...

Page 410: ...ture natural scenery such as trees flowers and sky Sports It s good to capture sports scenery Sunset It s good to capture the sunset scenery Night It s good to capture the night scenery Slow shutter speeds are used to detect night landscape ISO Control the camera s sensitivity to light Choose from Auto 400 200 and 100 White balance Choose from Auto Incandescent Sunny Fluorescent and Cloudy Colour ...

Page 411: ...se your phone s location based services Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location If you upload tagged pictures to a blog that supports geotagging you can see the pictures displayed on a map NOTE This function uses wireless networks You need to checkmark Use wireless networks From the Home screen tap the Menu Key Settings Location security Use wireless networks Restore all came...

Page 412: ...change behind the settings menu Viewing your saved photos You can access your saved photos from within the camera mode Just tap the Gallery button and your Gallery will be displayed TIP Flick left or right to view other photos or videos SlideShow Tap to see slide show Menu Tap to access the following options Share to share the picture via various methods such as Bluetooth or Messaging Delete to de...

Page 413: ...7 Setting a photo as wallpaper 1 Tap the photo you want to set as wallpaper to open it 2 Tap the screen to open the options menu 3 Tap Menu More Set as Wallpaper 4 Crop the image as desired and tap Save ...

Page 414: ...om out Alternatively you can use the Volume Keys Brightness This defines and controls of the amount of sunlight entering the lens Slide the brightness indicator along the bar towards for a lower brightness video or towards for a higher brightness video Flash Allows you turn on the flash when recording video in a dark place Video Camera ...

Page 415: ... settings on page 101 Camera mode Slide this icon up to switch to camera mode Start recording Allows you to start recording Gallery This enables you to access your saved photos and videos from within the video camera mode Simply tap and your Gallery will appear on the screen ...

Page 416: ...the video 4 Tap the Record icon once to start recording 5 REC will appear at the bottom of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video 6 Tap the Stop icon on the screen to stop recording After recording a video A still image representing your video will appear on the screen Play Tap to play the video Share Tap to share the picture via various methods such as Bluetooth or Messaging ...

Page 417: ...options Adjust the video camera settings by scrolling the list After selecting the option tap the Back key Video size Tap to set the size in pixels of the video you record Select the video size from Full HD 1920X1088 HD 1280X720 TV 720X480 VGA 640X480 QVGA 320X240 and QCIF 176X144 MMS White balance The white balance ensures any the white areas in your video are realistic To enable your camera to a...

Page 418: ...d automatically Restore all video camera default settings Tap whenever you want to know how a function operates This will provide you a quick guide Watching your saved videos 1 In the viewfinder tap 2 Your Gallery will appear on the screen 3 Tap a video to play it automatically Adjusting the volume when viewing a video To adjust the volume of a video while it is playing use the Volume Keys on the ...

Page 419: ...When you tap a photo from Grid view it will be displayed in Full view Calendar View In Folder view tap to change to the Calendar view The calendar will open and you will see with photos taken on the days Timeline view The phone s Gallery provides a timeline view of your photos and videos From the Grid view mode drag to the right The date you took your photos will be displayed starting with the mos...

Page 420: ...Share and choose from any of the available applications 3 When you choose Email Gmail or Messaging your photo will be attached to a message which you can then write and send normally TIP If you have a social networking account set up on your phone you can share your photo with that social networking community Sending a video 1 To send a video touch and hold the video you want 2 Tap Share and choos...

Page 421: ...More Set as 2 Choose from Contact icon or Wallpaper Viewing a slideshow To view a slideshow of your photos open the Gallery and tap a photo Once the photo is displayed tap the screen to see the menu Tap Slideshow to begin the slideshow of all your photos View photo details You can view a photo s detailed information such as the name date time size and type While viewing a photo tap Menu More Detai...

Page 422: ...nnection mode Mass storage 3 Tap Mass storage and OK to confirm 4 You can view the phone content on your PC and transfer the files NOTE If you don t want to see USB connection mode popup uncheck Don t ask again on USB connection mode popup or turn off Always ask Settings Connectivity settings Always ask Music Your phone has a music player that lets you play all your favourite tracks To access the ...

Page 423: ...o files from the PC to the phone s removable storage You may copy or move files from the PC to the phone s removable storage using a card reader If there is a video file with a subtitle file smi file with the same name as the video file place them in the same folder to display the subtitle automatically when playing the video file When downloading music or video files copyright must be secured Ple...

Page 424: ...kip to the next song 6 Tap to go back to the beginning of the song Tap twice to go back to the previous song To change the volume while listening to music press the up and down Volume Keys on the left side of the phone To display the options for a song touch and hold any song in the list You will see the following options Play Add to playlist Use as ringtone Delete Share Search and Details Working...

Page 425: ... can also add the song that is playing in the Playback screen as the first song in a playlist by pressing the Menu Key then tapping Add to playlist or tapping Save as playlist to save all the songs in an album that you re playing as a playlist To remove a song from a playlist 1 Open a playlist 2 Touch and hold the song you want to remove then tap Remove from playlist or when viewing the currently ...

Page 426: ...ts may be protected by international treaties and national copyright laws Therefore it may be necessary to obtain permission or a licence to reproduce or copy music In some countries national laws prohibit private copying of copyrighted material Before downloading or copying the file please check the national laws of the relevant country concerning the use of such material ...

Page 427: ...hronize with your phone Google Maps To open Google Maps and view your location 1 From the Home screen tap the Applications Key and tap Maps 2 Tap the My location icon on the map The map centers on a blue dot that indicates your location A blue circle around the dot indicates that your actual location is within the circle To get an address and additional information for a location Touch and hold a ...

Page 428: ...arch for a location and view it on a map You can also search for places on the map that you re viewing To search for a location 1 While viewing a map tap the Search field at the top of the screen You can also tap the Menu Key and tap Search 2 In the search box enter the place you re looking for You can enter an address a city or a type of business or establishment For example theater in New York 3...

Page 429: ...t box and your destination in the second text box To reverse directions tap the Menu Key and tap Reverse Start End 3 Tap the icon for car public transit or walking directions 4 Tap Get directions The directions to your destination appear in a list To view turn by turn directions in a list You can view each turn in your route as a list of written directions When viewing a list of directions tap the...

Page 430: ... for locations of interest The results are displayed as markers along your route the first result is labeled You can tap a label for more information about the marker When you re finished tap the Navigation icon to return to Navigation View My Places My Places bookmarks your favourite places such as addresses or local businesses to be able to find them quickly later To view My Places While viewing...

Page 431: ...itation only You must join Latitude and then invite your friends to view your location or accept invitations from your friends To join Latitude While viewing a map tap the Menu Key and tap Join Latitude The first time you join Latitude you re prompted to accept or reject the Google privacy policy After you ve joined Latitude the Join Latitude option changes to Latitude To open Latitude After you j...

Page 432: ...he screen If your friends already use Latitude they receive an email request and a notification on Latitude If they have not yet joined Latitude they receive an email inviting them to sign in to Latitude with their Google Account Places To find places Tap the Places icon while in Google Maps to find different venues such as gas stations coffee shops bars restaurants etc Once you select a category ...

Page 433: ... application or you can post your own comments If you install applications and games from Play Store they appear in the phone s menu below the preloaded applications and you can find them by scrolling down with your finger You can open downloaded applications from the Play Store by tapping the Menu Key My apps To download applications and games 1 From the Play Store home page tap a category near t...

Page 434: ...e descriptions and the prices of the application will be displayed 5 Tap the price button at the top right of the screen for paid applications For free applications tap the FREE button The applications will then be downloaded and installed NOTE To purchase a paid app you ll need to set up a payment method with Google Checkout You have the option to use a credit card or charge to your carrier bill ...

Page 435: ... configured when you first set up your phone Depending on your synchronization settings Gmail on your phone is automatically synchronized with your Gmail account on the web The inbox conversations list is your default Gmail view Tap the Menu Key then tap Refresh to send or receive new email and to synchronize your email with your Gmail account on the web Tap the Menu Key for the following addition...

Page 436: ... searches for contacts to chat with or any chat records that contain the word s you entered Sign out Sign out from chat When you tap the Talk icon from the Home screen you will be signed in automatically if you activate Sign in automatically Settings Allows you to adjust various settings More Choose from End all chats to close all the current chats Invites to see a list of friends you have invited...

Page 437: ...Google Talk messages 1 From the Friends list tap the Menu Key then tap Settings 2 Checkmark notifications to receive a notification in the Status Bar when a new chat message arrives 3 Tap Select ringtone to choose a ringtone that will ring to notify you of a new chat 4 Tap Vibrate to choose the vibration setting when you receive a notification of a new chat To show or hide the mobile indicator to ...

Page 438: ...the Menu Key then tap Settings 2 Checkmark or uncheck Automatically sign in When Automatically sign in is checked you are signed into Google Talk when you turn on your phone To set Google Talk to change your status 1 From the Friends list tap the Menu Key then tap Settings 2 Checkmark or uncheckmark Automatic away status When Automatic away status is checkmarked your status will automatically be c...

Page 439: ... or adjust the alarm settings Using the calculator 1 From the Home screen tap the Applications Key and tap Calculator 2 Tap the number keys to enter numbers 3 For simple calculations tap the function you want x or followed by 4 For more complex calculations tap the Menu Key tap the Advanced panel then choose an option Adding an event to your calendar NOTE You must create a Google account to use Ca...

Page 440: ...r event to begin and finish 4 Tap the Where field to enter the location 5 To add a note to your event tap the Description field and enter the details 6 To repeat the event set Repetition and set Reminders if necessary 7 Tap Save to save the event in the calendar A coloured square in the calendar will mark all days that have saved events An alarm will sound at the event start time if you set it Cha...

Page 441: ...me screen tap the Applications Key Polaris Office 2 Register your name and email address on the User Registration page If you want to skip the registration process tap Later 3 Tap My Files for folders and documents on your micro SD card 4 Tap the Menu Key New File to start a new document 5 Tap a document type 6 Enter contents in the document using the tools at the bottom of the screen 7 When you r...

Page 442: ...n the root directory Tap the document that you want to view or edit NOTE You can also open an attachment in an email by tapping the attachment in the message 1 The document opens for you to view If you want to edit it Tap the Menu Key then select Edit Mode To move between pages or pan through the document scroll in the corresponding direction To change the zoom level tap the Menu Key Zoom then tap...

Page 443: ...olaris Office application has a toolbar that appears automatically when you create a document 1 To display the toolbar in an existing document Tap the Menu Key then select Edit Mode 2 Tap a toolbar icon and the corresponding tool options will be displayed in a pop up balloon for you to tap and use 3 To hide the tool options pop up balloon tap the toolbar icon again Left and right arrows on the too...

Page 444: ... on the server as desired Voice Control You can search by voice and complete other voice actions such as calling or texting a contact sending an email creating a note or getting directions with just a simple tap of the Voice Control icon 1 From the Home screen tap the Applications Key Voice Search 2 Wait for the Say a command prompt then say your query 3 For a query the search results will be disp...

Page 445: ...cordings You can listen to the saved recordings Sending the voice recording 1 Once you have finished recording you can send the audio clip Tap Share 2 Choose from Bluetooth Wi Fi share Email Gmail and Messaging When you select Email Gmail or Messaging the voice recording will be added to a message that you can write and send normally App Manager You can manage your programs with App Manager 1 You ...

Page 446: ...inate the applications 2 You are allowed to see the installed applications by tapping on the Installed apps tab 3 You are allowed to see the capacity of System memory and SD card by tapping the Storage tab 4 You can place the App Manager widget on the homescreen and easily check the number of currently running applications ...

Page 447: ... your network provider Tool bar The icons bar on the screen below makes it easier to use the browser The browser that allows you to look at webpages similarly to how you would on a computer Back Moves to the previous web page Forward Used in conjunction with the Back Key This allows you to go back and forth between web pages without opening multiple windows Windows Shows all your open windows New ...

Page 448: ...s or podcasts An RSS document called a feed web feed or channel contains either a summary of content from an associated website or its full text RSS makes it possible for people to keep up to date with their favourite websites in an automated way that is easier than checking manually The user subscribes to a feed by entering its link into the reader or clicking an RSS icon in a browser that starts...

Page 449: ...ext to be entered More Home page To move to the Home page Set home page To set the current page as your home page Add shortcut to home Add the current page as shortcut to home screen Page info To view the web page details Downloads To view downloaded history TIP To return to the previous web page tap the Back key Adding bookmarks 1 Tap next to the URL field From Thumbnail view tap Add enter a name...

Page 450: ...134 The Web Changing the Browser settings Tap and set any desired options ...

Page 451: ...th applications that support rotation Launches LG Home Panorama or changes the On Screen Phone preferences Maximizes the On Screen Phone window Exits the On Screen Phone program Minimizes the On Screen Phone window On Screen Phone features Real time transfer and control displays and controls your mobile phone screen when connected to your PC Mouse control allows you to control your mobile phone by...

Page 452: ...into the on Screen phone window the files you send are stored on OSP folder LG Home Panorama Shows the whole work spaces of LG Home You can easily organise icons or widgets and run an application by double clicking the shortcut NOTE Please make sure that LG Home is the default launcher Some widgets may not work properly on the LG Home Panorama How to install On Screen Phone on your PC Visit LG Hom...

Page 453: ...se make sure that the battery may run out more quickly due to the current consumption if On Screen Phone is connected via Wi Fi When you connect your mobile phone to your PC via Mobile Hotspot and access to the Internet on the PC additional data charges may be incurred depending on your DataPro data plan Access to the Internet using Wi Fi networks may not work well depending on the network s traff...

Page 454: ...of the Home screen to check the On Screen Phone connection status To disconnect your phone from your PC Click in the top left of the On Screen Phone window Alternatively drag down the Status Bar at the top of the Home screen and select On Screen Phone connected Disconnect On Screen Phone Touch Disconnect in the disconnect dialog ...

Page 455: ...ss networks screen tap the Airplane mode checkbox to turn it on a blue checkmark will appear 2 Tap again to turn it off OR 1 Press and hold the Power Lock Key and tap Airplane mode 2 Press and hold the Power Lock Key and tap Airplane mode again to turn it off Wi Fi Turns on Wi Fi to connect to available Wi Fi networks Wi Fi settings Allows you to set up and manage wireless access points Set networ...

Page 456: ... Bluetooth devices Scan for devices Set your device to be visible to other Bluetooth devices Tethering portable hotspot You can configure the tethering and portable Wi Fi hotspot settings VPN settings Displays the list of Virtual Private Networks VPNs that you ve previously configured Allows you to add different types of VPN Mobile networks Set options for data roaming network mode operators acces...

Page 457: ...Adjust the phone s volume settings to suit your needs and your environment Phone ringtone Select the ringtone for incoming calls Notification ringtone Select the ringtone for notifications such as new messages receipt or calendar events Audible touch tones Select whether to hear tones when you use the dialpad Audible selection Select whether to hear sound when you tap buttons icons and other onscr...

Page 458: ...Front Key LED timeout Set the time delay before the LED on the front side of your phone automatically turns off Screen optimization Change the resolution size of downloaded applications to fit the screen size Motion sensor calibration Allows you to reset calibration for motion sensor Gesture Move cursor Checkmark to set the device to move the cursor by tapping on any side of the device to move the...

Page 459: ...pping the phone over Location security Use wireless networks If you check Use wireless networks your phone will determine your approximate location by using Wi Fi and mobile networks When you check this option you re asked whether you consent to allowing Google to use your location when providing these services Use GPS satellites If you check Use GPS satellites your phone will be determine your lo...

Page 460: ...ords select to show passwords as you type them or deselect to hide passwords as you type them Select device administrators Add or remove administrators Use secure credentials Allows you to access secure certificates Install from SD card Choose to install encrypted certificates from your micro SD card Set password Set or change the credential storage password Clear storage Clear credential storage ...

Page 461: ...r screen unlock information If you used up all 5 opportunities you will have to wait 30 seconds to attempt unlocking the phone again When you can t recall your Unlock Pattern PIN or Password If you logged into a Google account on the phone and failed to use the correct pattern 5 times tap Forgot Pattern You will be required to sign in with your Google account and prompted to create a new unlock pa...

Page 462: ...TORY HARD RESET screen is displayed release the keys 4 Press the Power Lock Key to confirm delete all user data and press the Volume Keys to cancel Applications Unknown sources Checkmark to permit the installation of applications you get from Web sites email or any other locations other than Play Store Warning Depending on the applications you install the mobile phone may not operate correctly and...

Page 463: ... applications Battery use See what has been using the battery Development Set options for application development Accounts sync Allows you to enable Background data Auto sync and synchronize or add new accounts Privacy Allows you to perform a Factory data reset Be careful as this will erase all your data SD card phone storage Allows you to check total available micro SD card space You can also unm...

Page 464: ... advantage of it Accessibility Use the Accessibility settings to configure any accessibility plug ins you have installed on your phone NOTE Requires additional plug ins to become selectable Connectivity settings USB connection mode Your phone can be used as a mass storage device if you have a memory card inserted You can set Mass storage as a default setting for USB connection mode On Screen Phone...

Page 465: ...149 Date time Set date time time zone and date and time formats About phone View legal information check phone status and software versions and perform the software update ...

Page 466: ... notes that appear at each step before proceeding Please note that removing the USB cable or battery during the upgrade may seriously damage your mobile phone LG Mobile Phone Software update via Over the Air OTA This feature allows you to update the firmware of your phone to the newer version conveniently via OTA without connecting the USB data cable This feature is only available if and when LG m...

Page 467: ...ability of the newer version of the firmware for all handset models NOTE Your personal data including information about your Google account and any other accounts your system application data and settings any downloaded applications and your DRM licence might be lost in the process of updating your phone s software Therefore LG recommends that you back up your personal data before updating your ph...

Page 468: ...d by DivX LLC a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video Visit divx com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video on Demand VOD movies To obtain your registration code locate the DivX VOD section in...

Page 469: ...mium content DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license Dolby Mobile Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories ...

Page 470: ...ed below may be optional Travel adaptor Data cable Connect your LG P936 and PC User Guide Learn more about your LG P936 Stereo headset NOTE Always use genuine LG accessories Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty Accessories may vary in different regions Accessories ...

Page 471: ... 2012 Signature of representative Declaration Supplementary Information Applicable Standards Details Product Details Suppliers Details Trade Name Model Name Product Name Address Name LG Electronics Inc LG Twin Tower 20 Yeouido dong Yeongdeungpo gu Seoul Korea 150 721 R TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EN 301 489 01 V1 8 1 EN 301 489 7 V 1 3 1 EN 301 489 17 V 2 1 1 EN 301 489 19 V 1 2 1 EN 301 489 24 V1 5 1...

Page 472: ...the phone or it is inserted incorrectly Make sure that the SIM card is correctly inserted No network connection Losing network Signal is weak or you are outside the carrier network Operator applied new services Move towards a window or into an open area Check the network operator coverage map Check whether the SIM card is more than 6 12 months old If so change your SIM at your network provider s n...

Page 473: ...a security code you will need to confirm the new code by re entering it The two codes you have entered do not match If you forget the code contact your service provider Any application cannot be set Not supported by service provider or registration required Contact your service provider ...

Page 474: ...reached New network not authorised Check for new restrictions Contact service provider or reset limit with PIN2 Phone cannot be switched on On Off key pressed too briefly Battery is not charged Battery contacts are dirty Press the On Off key down for at least two seconds Charge battery Check charging indicator on the display Clean the battery contacts ...

Page 475: ...ltage Charger defective Wrong charger Battery defective Charge battery Make sure phone is charging at a normal temperature Check the charger and connection to the phone Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary Plug the charger into a different socket If the charger does not warm up replace it Only use original LG accessories Replace battery ...

Page 476: ...e Settings menu and turn the function off Impossible to receive send SMS picture Memory full Delete some messages from the phone Files not opening Unsupported file format Check the file formats that can be supported SD card not working FAT16 FAT32 file system supported Check SD card file system via card reader or format SD card using the phone ...

Page 477: ... it has covered the area around the proximity sensor Make sure that the area around the proximity sensor is clean No sound Vibration mode Check the settings status of the sound menu to make sure you are not in vibrate or silent mode Hang up or freeze Intermittent software problem Remove the battery insert it again and switch on the phone Try to perform a software update via the website ...

Page 478: ...Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Phone locked and does not function Restarting the phone 1 Turn the phone off 2 Remove the battery cover 3 Install the battery 4 Close the cover 5 Turn the phone on again ...

Page 479: ......

Page 480: ......

Page 481: ......

Page 482: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for P936

Samsung galaxy S II Online User'S Manual preview
galaxy S II
Brand: Samsung Pages: 252
Samsung Galaxy S20 FE 5G Quick Start Manual preview
Galaxy S20 FE 5G
Brand: Samsung Pages: 19
Samsung Galaxy S Epic SPH-D700 Manual Del Usuario preview
Galaxy S Epic SPH-D700
Brand: Samsung Pages: 264
Samsung Galaxy S II Skyrocket SGH-i727 Manual Del Usuario preview
Galaxy S II Skyrocket SGH-i727
Brand: Samsung Pages: 206
Samsung Galaxy S Plus GT-I9001 User Manual preview
Galaxy S Plus GT-I9001
Brand: Samsung Pages: 147
Samsung Galaxy Note10+ Basic Manual preview
Galaxy Note10+
Brand: Samsung Pages: 48
Samsung Galaxy J7 Prime Quick Start Manual preview
Galaxy J7 Prime
Brand: Samsung Pages: 33
Samsung Galaxy J7 Getting Started Manual preview
Galaxy J7
Brand: Samsung Pages: 32
Samsung GALAXY J3 V Manual preview
GALAXY J3 V
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung Galaxy J3 Quick Start Manual preview
Galaxy J3
Brand: Samsung Pages: 11
Samsung Galaxy Fold Settings Manual preview
Galaxy Fold
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung Galaxy Fold Basic Manual preview
Galaxy Fold
Brand: Samsung Pages: 65
Samsung Galaxy Express Quick Start Manual preview
Galaxy Express
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung Galaxy Amp Prime 3 Quick Start Manuals preview
Galaxy Amp Prime 3
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung Galaxy A6 Quick Start Manual preview
Galaxy A6
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung Galaxy A51 User Manual preview
Galaxy A51
Brand: Samsung Pages: 163
Samsung Galaxy A42 5G Manual preview
Galaxy A42 5G
Brand: Samsung Pages: 10
Samsung Galaxy A32 5G Quick Start Manual preview
Galaxy A32 5G
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands